Fix texinfo problem by adding the required period after an @xref.
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 @kindex -Ur
977 @cindex constructors
978 @item -Ur
979 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
981 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
982 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986 @samp{-r} for the others.
987
988 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996 in a linker script.
997
998 @kindex -v
999 @kindex -V
1000 @kindex --version
1001 @cindex version
1002 @item -v
1003 @itemx --version
1004 @itemx -V
1005 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1006 lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008 @kindex -x
1009 @kindex --discard-all
1010 @cindex deleting local symbols
1011 @item -x
1012 @itemx --discard-all
1013 Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015 @kindex -X
1016 @kindex --discard-locals
1017 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1018 @item -X
1019 @itemx --discard-locals
1020 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1023
1024 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026 @cindex symbol tracing
1027 @item -y @var{symbol}
1028 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031 to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1037 @item -Y @var{path}
1038 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039 for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042 @item -z @var{keyword}
1043 The recognized keywords are:
1044 @table @samp
1045
1046 @item combreloc
1047 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048 lookup caching possible.
1049
1050 @item defs
1051 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1052 shared libraries are still allowed.
1053
1054 @item execstack
1055 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
1057 @item global
1058 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
1062 @item initfirst
1063 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068 objects.
1069
1070 @item interpose
1071 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072 but the primary executable.
1073
1074 @item lazy
1075 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078 Lazy binding is the default.
1079
1080 @item loadfltr
1081 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082 runtime.
1083
1084 @item muldefs
1085 Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087 @item nocombreloc
1088 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090 @item nocopyreloc
1091 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1093
1094 @item nodefaultlib
1095 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096 ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098 @item nodelete
1099 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101 @item nodlopen
1102 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104 @item nodump
1105 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
1107 @item noexecstack
1108 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
1110 @item text
1111 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113 @item notext
1114 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116 @item textoff
1117 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
1119 @item norelro
1120 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
1122 @item now
1123 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127 first called.
1128
1129 @item origin
1130 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
1132 @item relro
1133 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
1135 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
1141 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1142 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
1146 @item bndplt
1147 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
1149 @item noextern-protected-data
1150 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154 module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155 i386 and x86-64.
1156
1157 @end table
1158
1159 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1160
1161 @kindex -(
1162 @cindex groups of archives
1163 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1164 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175 resolved.
1176
1177 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179 more archives.
1180
1181 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1186 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1187 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191 restore the old behaviour.
1192
1193 @kindex --as-needed
1194 @kindex --no-as-needed
1195 @item --as-needed
1196 @itemx --no-as-needed
1197 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1198 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1199 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1201 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1202 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1204 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1206 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1210
1211 @kindex --add-needed
1212 @kindex --no-add-needed
1213 @item --add-needed
1214 @itemx --no-add-needed
1215 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1219
1220 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1222 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224 @kindex -Bdynamic
1225 @kindex -dy
1226 @kindex -call_shared
1227 @item -Bdynamic
1228 @itemx -dy
1229 @itemx -call_shared
1230 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1235 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1236
1237 @kindex -Bgroup
1238 @item -Bgroup
1239 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1242 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1244
1245 @kindex -Bstatic
1246 @kindex -dn
1247 @kindex -non_shared
1248 @kindex -static
1249 @item -Bstatic
1250 @itemx -dn
1251 @itemx -non_shared
1252 @itemx -static
1253 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1257 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1258 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1262 libraries.
1263
1264 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1265 @item -Bsymbolic
1266 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270 platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
1272 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1275 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1276 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277 libraries.
1278
1279 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287 which support shared libraries.
1288
1289 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
1292 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293 @item --dynamic-list-data
1294 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
1301 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
1305 @kindex --check-sections
1306 @kindex --no-check-sections
1307 @item --check-sections
1308 @itemx --no-check-sections
1309 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1310 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1311 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1314 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1315 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317 option.
1318
1319 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1323 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1324 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1325 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1326 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1327 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1328 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1329 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1331
1332 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1333 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1339 symbols.
1340
1341 @cindex cross reference table
1342 @kindex --cref
1343 @item --cref
1344 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1352 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354 symbol are listed.
1355
1356 @cindex common allocation
1357 @kindex --no-define-common
1358 @item --no-define-common
1359 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
1374 @cindex symbols, from command line
1375 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1377 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1384 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1387
1388 @cindex demangling, from command line
1389 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1390 @kindex --no-demangle
1391 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1392 @itemx --no-demangle
1393 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1397 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1400 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1402
1403 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1404 @kindex -I@var{file}
1405 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406 @item -I@var{file}
1407 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1408 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411 doing.
1412
1413 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1414 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1415 @item --fatal-warnings
1416 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1419
1420 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421 @item --force-exe-suffix
1422 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431 @kindex --gc-sections
1432 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1433 @cindex garbage collection
1434 @item --gc-sections
1435 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1436 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1437 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1438 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1439 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1440 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1441 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1442
1443 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1444 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1445 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1446 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1447 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1448 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1449 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1450 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1451 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1452
1453 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1454 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1455 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1456 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1457
1458 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1459 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1460 @cindex garbage collection
1461 @item --print-gc-sections
1462 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1463 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1464 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1465 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1466 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1467 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1468 line.
1469
1470 @kindex --print-output-format
1471 @cindex output format
1472 @item --print-output-format
1473 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1474 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1475 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1476
1477 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1478 @cindex memory usage
1479 @item --print-memory-usage
1480 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1481 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1482 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1483 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1484 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1485
1486 @smallexample
1487 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1488 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1489 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1490 @end smallexample
1491
1492 @cindex help
1493 @cindex usage
1494 @kindex --help
1495 @item --help
1496 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1497
1498 @kindex --target-help
1499 @item --target-help
1500 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1501
1502 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1503 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1504 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1505 @option{-M} option, above.
1506
1507 @cindex memory usage
1508 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1509 @item --no-keep-memory
1510 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1511 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1512 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1513 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1514 while linking a large executable.
1515
1516 @kindex --no-undefined
1517 @kindex -z defs
1518 @item --no-undefined
1519 @itemx -z defs
1520 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1521 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1522 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1523 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1524 libraries being linked in.
1525
1526 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1527 @kindex -z muldefs
1528 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1529 @itemx -z muldefs
1530 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1531 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1532 first definition will be used.
1533
1534 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1535 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1536 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1537 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1538 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1539 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1540 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1541 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1542 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1543
1544 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1545 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1546 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1547 a shared library.
1548
1549 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1550 libraries specified at link time are that:
1551
1552 @itemize @bullet
1553 @item
1554 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1555 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1556 resolvable at load time.
1557 @item
1558 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1559 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1560
1561 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1562 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1563 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1564 appropriate memset function.
1565 @end itemize
1566
1567 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1568 @item --no-undefined-version
1569 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1570 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1571 will be issued instead.
1572
1573 @kindex --default-symver
1574 @item --default-symver
1575 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1576 exported symbols.
1577
1578 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1579 @item --default-imported-symver
1580 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1581 imported symbols.
1582
1583 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1584 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1585 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1586 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1587 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1588 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1589 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1590 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1591 inappropriate.
1592
1593 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1594 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1595 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1596 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1597
1598 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1599 @item --no-whole-archive
1600 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1601 archive files.
1602
1603 @cindex output file after errors
1604 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1605 @item --noinhibit-exec
1606 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1607 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1608 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1609 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1610
1611 @kindex -nostdlib
1612 @item -nostdlib
1613 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1614 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1615 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1616
1617 @ifclear SingleFormat
1618 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1619 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1620 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1621 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1622 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1623 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1624 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1625 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1626 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1627 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1628 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1629 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1630 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1631 @end ifclear
1632
1633 @kindex -pie
1634 @kindex --pic-executable
1635 @item -pie
1636 @itemx --pic-executable
1637 @cindex position independent executables
1638 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1639 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1640 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1641 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1642 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1643 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1644
1645 @kindex -qmagic
1646 @item -qmagic
1647 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1648
1649 @kindex -Qy
1650 @item -Qy
1651 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1652
1653 @kindex --relax
1654 @cindex synthesizing linker
1655 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1656 @cindex --no-relax
1657 @item --relax
1658 @itemx --no-relax
1659 An option with machine dependent effects.
1660 @ifset GENERIC
1661 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1662 @end ifset
1663 @ifset H8300
1664 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1665 @end ifset
1666 @ifset I960
1667 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1668 @end ifset
1669 @ifset XTENSA
1670 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1671 @end ifset
1672 @ifset M68HC11
1673 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1674 @end ifset
1675 @ifset NIOSII
1676 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1677 @end ifset
1678 @ifset POWERPC
1679 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1680 @end ifset
1681
1682 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1683 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1684 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1685 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1686 instructions, and combining constant values.
1687
1688 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1689 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1690 @ifset GENERIC
1691 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1692 family of processors.
1693 @end ifset
1694
1695 @ifset GENERIC
1696 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1697 but ignored.
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1701 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1702
1703 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1704 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1705 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1706 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1707 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1708 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1709 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1710 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1711 @ifset GENERIC
1712 (such as VxWorks)
1713 @end ifset
1714 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1715 run-time memory.
1716
1717 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1718 or symbols needed for relocations.
1719
1720 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1721 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1722
1723 @ifset GENERIC
1724 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1725 @cindex runtime library search path
1726 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1727 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1728 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1729 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1730 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1731 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1732 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1733 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1734 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1735 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1736
1737 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1738 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1739 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1740 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1741 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1742 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1743 file systems.
1744
1745 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1746 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1747 the @option{-rpath} option.
1748 @end ifset
1749
1750 @ifset GENERIC
1751 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1752 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1753 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1754 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1755 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1756 of the input files.
1757
1758 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1759 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1760 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1761 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1762 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1763 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1764 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1765 appearing multiple times.
1766
1767 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1768 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1769 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1770 runtime linker would do.
1771
1772 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1773 libraries:
1774 @enumerate
1775 @item
1776 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1777 @item
1778 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1779 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1780 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1781 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1782 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1783 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1784 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1785 @item
1786 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1787 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1788 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1789 @item
1790 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1791 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1792 @item
1793 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1794 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1795 @item
1796 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1797 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1798 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1799 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1800 @item
1801 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1802 @item
1803 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1804 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1805 @end enumerate
1806
1807 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1808 warning and continue with the link.
1809 @end ifset
1810
1811 @kindex -shared
1812 @kindex -Bshareable
1813 @item -shared
1814 @itemx -Bshareable
1815 @cindex shared libraries
1816 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1817 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1818 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1819 undefined symbols in the link.
1820
1821 @kindex --sort-common
1822 @item --sort-common
1823 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1824 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1825 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1826 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1827 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1828 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1829 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1830 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1831
1832 @kindex --sort-section=name
1833 @item --sort-section=name
1834 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1835 patterns in the linker script.
1836
1837 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1838 @item --sort-section=alignment
1839 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1840 patterns in the linker script.
1841
1842 @kindex --split-by-file
1843 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1844 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1845 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1846 size of 1 if not given.
1847
1848 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1849 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1850 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1851 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1852 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1853 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1854 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1855 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1856 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1857 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1858 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1859 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1860
1861 @kindex --stats
1862 @item --stats
1863 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1864 as execution time and memory usage.
1865
1866 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1867 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1868 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1869 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1870 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1871
1872 @kindex --traditional-format
1873 @cindex traditional format
1874 @item --traditional-format
1875 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1876 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1877 use the traditional format instead.
1878
1879 @cindex dbx
1880 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1881 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1882 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1883 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1884 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1885 combine duplicate entries.
1886
1887 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1888 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1889 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1890 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1891 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1892 line.
1893 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1894 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1895 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1896 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1897 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1898
1899 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1900 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1901 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1902 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1903 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1904 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1905 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1906 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1907 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1908
1909 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1910 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1911 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1912 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1913 byte of the text segment.
1914
1915 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1916 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1917 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1918 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1919 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1920 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1921
1922 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1923 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1924 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1925 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1926 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1927
1928 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1929 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1930 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1931 values for @samp{method}:
1932
1933 @table @samp
1934 @item ignore-all
1935 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1936
1937 @item report-all
1938 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1939
1940 @item ignore-in-object-files
1941 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1942 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1943
1944 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1945 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1946 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1947 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1948 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1949 command line.
1950 @end table
1951
1952 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1953 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1954
1955 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1956 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1957 can change this to a warning.
1958
1959 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1960 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1961 @item --dll-verbose
1962 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1963 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1964 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1965 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1966 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1967
1968 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1969 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1970 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1971 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1972 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1973 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1974 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1975 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1976 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1977 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1978 @xref{WIN32}.
1979
1980 @kindex --warn-common
1981 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1982 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1983 @item --warn-common
1984 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1985 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1986 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1987 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1988 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1989 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1990
1991 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1992
1993 @table @samp
1994 @item int i = 1;
1995 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1996 file.
1997
1998 @item extern int i;
1999 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2000 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2001 variable somewhere.
2002
2003 @item int i;
2004 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2005 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2006 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2007 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2008 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2009 a definition of the same variable.
2010 @end table
2011
2012 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2013 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2014 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2015 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2016 a common symbol.
2017
2018 @enumerate
2019 @item
2020 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2021 definition for the symbol.
2022 @smallexample
2023 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by definition
2025 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2026 @end smallexample
2027
2028 @item
2029 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2030 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2031 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2032 @smallexample
2033 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding common
2035 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2036 @end smallexample
2037
2038 @item
2039 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2040 @smallexample
2041 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2042 of `@var{symbol}'
2043 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2044 @end smallexample
2045
2046 @item
2047 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2048 @smallexample
2049 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overridden by larger common
2051 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2052 @end smallexample
2053
2054 @item
2055 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2056 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2057 encountered in a different order.
2058 @smallexample
2059 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2060 overriding smaller common
2061 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2062 @end smallexample
2063 @end enumerate
2064
2065 @kindex --warn-constructors
2066 @item --warn-constructors
2067 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2068 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2069 detect the use of global constructors.
2070
2071 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2072 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2073 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2074 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2075 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2076 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2077 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2078 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2079 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2080 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2081 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2082 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2083 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2084
2085 @kindex --warn-once
2086 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2087 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2088 @item --warn-once
2089 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2090 which refers to it.
2091
2092 @kindex --warn-orphan
2093 @kindex --no-warn-orphan
2094 @cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2095 @cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2096 @item --warn-orphan
2097 The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2098 warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2099 output file. @xref{Orphan Sections}. The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2100 option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2101 sections.
2102
2103 @kindex --warn-section-align
2104 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2105 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2106 @item --warn-section-align
2107 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2108 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2109 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2110 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2111 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2112
2113 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2114 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2115 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2116
2117 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2118 @item --warn-alternate-em
2119 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2120
2121 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2122 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2123 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2124 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2125 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2126
2127 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2128 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2129 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2130 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2131
2132 @kindex --whole-archive
2133 @cindex including an entire archive
2134 @item --whole-archive
2135 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2136 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2137 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2138 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2139 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2140 library. This option may be used more than once.
2141
2142 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2143 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2144 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2145 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2146 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2147
2148 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2149 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2150 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2151 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2152 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2153 @var{symbol}.
2154
2155 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2156 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2157 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2158 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2159
2160 Here is a trivial example:
2161
2162 @smallexample
2163 void *
2164 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2165 @{
2166 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2167 return __real_malloc (c);
2168 @}
2169 @end smallexample
2170
2171 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2172 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2173 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2174 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2175
2176 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2177 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2178 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2179 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2180 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2181
2182 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2183 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2184 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2185 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2186
2187 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2188 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2189 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2190 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2191 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2192
2193 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2194 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2195 @item --enable-new-dtags
2196 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2197 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2198 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2199 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2200 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2201 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2202 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2203 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2204
2205 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2206 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2207 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2208 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2209 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2210 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2211 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2212
2213 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2214 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2215 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2216 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2217 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2218 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2219 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2220
2221 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2222 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2223 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2224 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2225 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2226 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2227 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2228 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2229 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2230 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2231 compress DWARF debug sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2232 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compress DWARF debug
2233 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2234 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2235 compresses DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2236
2237 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2238 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2239 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2240 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2241 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2242 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2243
2244 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2245 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2246 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2247 has been used.
2248
2249 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2250 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2251
2252 @kindex --build-id
2253 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2254 @item --build-id
2255 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2256 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2257 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2258 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2259 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2260 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2261 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2262 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2263 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2264 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2265 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2266
2267 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2268 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2269 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2270 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2271 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2272 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2273
2274 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2275 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2276 @end table
2277
2278 @c man end
2279
2280 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2281
2282 @c man begin OPTIONS
2283
2284 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2285 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2286 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2287 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2288 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2289 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2290 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2291 object file).
2292
2293 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2294 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2295 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2296 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2297
2298 @table @gcctabopt
2299
2300 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2301 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2302 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2303 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2304 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2305
2306 @kindex --base-file
2307 @item --base-file @var{file}
2308 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2309 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2310 @file{dlltool}.
2311 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2312
2313 @kindex --dll
2314 @item --dll
2315 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2316 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2317 file.
2318 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2319
2320 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2321 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2322 @item --enable-long-section-names
2323 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2324 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2325 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2326 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2327 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2328 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2329 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2330 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2331 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2332 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2333 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2334 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2335 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2336 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2337 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2338 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2339 image and not stripping symbols.
2340 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2341
2342 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2343 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2344 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2345 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2346 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2347 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2348 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2349 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2350 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2351 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2352 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2353 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2354 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2355 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2356 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2357 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2358 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2359 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2360
2361 @kindex --leading-underscore
2362 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2363 @item --leading-underscore
2364 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2365 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2366 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2367 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2368
2369 @cindex DLLs, creating
2370 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2371 @item --export-all-symbols
2372 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2373 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2374 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2375 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2376 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2377 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2378 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2379 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2380 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2381 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2382 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2383 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2384 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2385 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2386 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2387 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2388 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2389 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2390 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2391 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2392 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2393 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2394 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2395
2396 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2397 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2398 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2399 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2400 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2401
2402 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2403 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2404 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2405 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2406
2407 @kindex --file-alignment
2408 @item --file-alignment
2409 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2410 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2411 512.
2412 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2413
2414 @cindex heap size
2415 @kindex --heap
2416 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2417 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2418 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2419 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2420 committed.
2421 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2422
2423 @cindex image base
2424 @kindex --image-base
2425 @item --image-base @var{value}
2426 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2427 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2428 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2429 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2430 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2431 for dlls.
2432 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2433
2434 @kindex --kill-at
2435 @item --kill-at
2436 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2437 symbols before they are exported.
2438 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2439
2440 @kindex --large-address-aware
2441 @item --large-address-aware
2442 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2443 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2444 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2445 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2446 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2447 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2448
2449 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2450 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2451 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2452 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2453 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2454 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2455 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2456
2457 @kindex --major-image-version
2458 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2459 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2460 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2461
2462 @kindex --major-os-version
2463 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2464 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2465 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2466
2467 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2468 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2469 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2470 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2471
2472 @kindex --minor-image-version
2473 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2474 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2475 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2476
2477 @kindex --minor-os-version
2478 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2479 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2480 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2481
2482 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2483 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2484 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2485 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2486
2487 @cindex DEF files, creating
2488 @cindex DLLs, creating
2489 @kindex --output-def
2490 @item --output-def @var{file}
2491 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2492 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2493 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2494 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2495 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2496 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2497
2498 @cindex DLLs, creating
2499 @kindex --out-implib
2500 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2501 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2502 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2503 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2504 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2505 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2506 creation step.
2507 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2508
2509 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2510 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2511 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2512 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2513 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2514 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2515 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2516 execution are avoided.
2517 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2518
2519 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2520 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2521 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2522 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2523 default.
2524 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2525
2526 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2527 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2528 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2529 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2530 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2531 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2532 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2533 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2534 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2535 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2536
2537 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2538 @item --enable-auto-import
2539 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2540 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2541 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2542 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2543 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2544 specification published by Microsoft.
2545
2546 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2547 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2548 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2549 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2550 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2551
2552 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2553 see this message:
2554
2555 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2556 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2557
2558 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2559 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2560 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2561 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2562 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2563 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2564 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2565 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2566 the warning, and exit.
2567
2568 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2569 data type of the exported variable:
2570
2571 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2572 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2573 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2574
2575 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2576 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2577 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2578 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2579
2580 @example
2581 extern type extern_array[];
2582 extern_array[1] -->
2583 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2584 @end example
2585
2586 or
2587
2588 @example
2589 extern type extern_array[];
2590 extern_array[1] -->
2591 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2592 @end example
2593
2594 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2595 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2596
2597 @example
2598 extern struct s extern_struct;
2599 extern_struct.field -->
2600 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2601 @end example
2602
2603 or
2604
2605 @example
2606 extern long long extern_ll;
2607 extern_ll -->
2608 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2609 @end example
2610
2611 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2612 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2613 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2614 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2615 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2616 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2617 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2618 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2619
2620 Original:
2621 @example
2622 --foo.h
2623 extern int arr[];
2624 --foo.c
2625 #include "foo.h"
2626 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2627 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2628 @}
2629 @end example
2630
2631 Solution 1:
2632 @example
2633 --foo.h
2634 extern int arr[];
2635 --foo.c
2636 #include "foo.h"
2637 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2638 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2639 volatile int *parr = arr;
2640 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2641 @}
2642 @end example
2643
2644 Solution 2:
2645 @example
2646 --foo.h
2647 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2648 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2649 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2650 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2651 #else
2652 #define FOO_IMPORT
2653 #endif
2654 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2655 --foo.c
2656 #include "foo.h"
2657 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2658 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2659 @}
2660 @end example
2661
2662 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2663 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2664 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2665 functions).
2666 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2667
2668 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2669 @item --disable-auto-import
2670 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2671 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2675 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2676 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2677 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2678 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2679 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2680 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2681
2682 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2683 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2684 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2685 DLLs.
2686 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2687
2688 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2689 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2690 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2691 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692
2693 @kindex --section-alignment
2694 @item --section-alignment
2695 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2696 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2697 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2698
2699 @cindex stack size
2700 @kindex --stack
2701 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2702 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2703 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2704 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2705 committed.
2706 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2707
2708 @kindex --subsystem
2709 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2710 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2711 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2712 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2713 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2714 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2715 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2716 @var{which}.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2718
2719 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2720 of the PE file header:
2721 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2722
2723 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2724 @item --high-entropy-va
2725 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2726 (ASLR).
2727
2728 @kindex --dynamicbase
2729 @item --dynamicbase
2730 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2731 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2732 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2733
2734 @kindex --forceinteg
2735 @item --forceinteg
2736 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2737
2738 @kindex --nxcompat
2739 @item --nxcompat
2740 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2741 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2742
2743 @kindex --no-isolation
2744 @item --no-isolation
2745 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2746
2747 @kindex --no-seh
2748 @item --no-seh
2749 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2750 this image.
2751
2752 @kindex --no-bind
2753 @item --no-bind
2754 Do not bind this image.
2755
2756 @kindex --wdmdriver
2757 @item --wdmdriver
2758 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2759
2760 @kindex --tsaware
2761 @item --tsaware
2762 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2763
2764 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2765 @item --insert-timestamp
2766 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2767 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2768 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2769 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2770 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2771 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2772 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2773 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2774 identically.
2775 @end table
2776
2777 @c man end
2778
2779 @ifset C6X
2780 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2781
2782 @c man begin OPTIONS
2783
2784 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2785 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2786 all executables use an index of 0.
2787
2788 @table @gcctabopt
2789
2790 @kindex --dsbt-size
2791 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2792 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2793 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2794 entries.
2795
2796 @kindex --dsbt-index
2797 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2798 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2799 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2800 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2801 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2802
2803 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2804 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2805 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2806
2807 @end table
2808
2809 @c man end
2810 @end ifset
2811
2812 @ifset M68HC11
2813 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2814
2815 @c man begin OPTIONS
2816
2817 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2818 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2819
2820 @table @gcctabopt
2821
2822 @kindex --no-trampoline
2823 @item --no-trampoline
2824 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2825 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2826 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2827
2828 @kindex --bank-window
2829 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2830 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2831 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2832 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2833 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2834
2835 @end table
2836
2837 @c man end
2838 @end ifset
2839
2840 @ifset M68K
2841 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2842
2843 @c man begin OPTIONS
2844
2845 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2846 when linking for 68K targets.
2847
2848 @table @gcctabopt
2849
2850 @kindex --got
2851 @item --got=@var{type}
2852 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2853 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2854 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2855 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2856
2857 @end table
2858
2859 @c man end
2860 @end ifset
2861
2862 @ifset MIPS
2863 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2864
2865 @c man begin OPTIONS
2866
2867 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2868 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2869
2870 @table @gcctabopt
2871
2872 @kindex --insn32
2873 @item --insn32
2874 @kindex --no-insn32
2875 @itemx --no-insn32
2876 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2877 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2878 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2879 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2880 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2881 possible.
2882
2883 @end table
2884
2885 @c man end
2886 @end ifset
2887
2888 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2889 @node Environment
2890 @section Environment Variables
2891
2892 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2893
2894 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2895 @ifclear SingleFormat
2896 @code{GNUTARGET},
2897 @end ifclear
2898 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2899
2900 @ifclear SingleFormat
2901 @kindex GNUTARGET
2902 @cindex default input format
2903 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2904 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2905 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2906 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2907 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2908 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2909 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2910 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2911 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2912 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2913 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2914 @end ifclear
2915
2916 @kindex LDEMULATION
2917 @cindex default emulation
2918 @cindex emulation, default
2919 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2920 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2921 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2922 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2923 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2924 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2925 linker was configured.
2926
2927 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2928 @cindex demangling, default
2929 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2930 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2931 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2932 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2933 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2934 options.
2935
2936 @c man end
2937 @end ifset
2938
2939 @node Scripts
2940 @chapter Linker Scripts
2941
2942 @cindex scripts
2943 @cindex linker scripts
2944 @cindex command files
2945 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2946 written in the linker command language.
2947
2948 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2949 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2950 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2951 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2952 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2953 described below.
2954
2955 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2956 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2957 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2958 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2959 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2960
2961 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2962 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2963 default linker script.
2964
2965 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2966 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2967 Linker Scripts}.
2968
2969 @menu
2970 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2971 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2972 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2973 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2974 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2975 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2976 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2977 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2978 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2979 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2980 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2981 @end menu
2982
2983 @node Basic Script Concepts
2984 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2985 @cindex linker script concepts
2986 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2987 describe the linker script language.
2988
2989 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2990 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2991 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2992 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2993 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2994 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2995 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2996 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2997
2998 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2999 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3000 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3001 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3002 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3003 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3004 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3005 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3006 of debugging information.
3007
3008 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3009 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3010 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3011 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3012 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3013 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3014 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3015 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3016 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3017 RAM address would be the VMA.
3018
3019 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3020 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3021
3022 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3023 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3024 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3025 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3026 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3027 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3028 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3029
3030 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3031 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3032 option.
3033
3034 @node Script Format
3035 @section Linker Script Format
3036 @cindex linker script format
3037 Linker scripts are text files.
3038
3039 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3040 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3041 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3042 generally ignored.
3043
3044 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3045 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3046 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3047 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3048 file name.
3049
3050 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3051 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3052 to whitespace.
3053
3054 @node Simple Example
3055 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3056 @cindex linker script example
3057 @cindex example of linker script
3058 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3059
3060 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3061 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3062 memory layout of the output file.
3063
3064 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3065 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3066 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3067 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3068 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3069 your input files.
3070
3071 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3072 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3073 linker script which will do that:
3074 @smallexample
3075 SECTIONS
3076 @{
3077 . = 0x10000;
3078 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3079 . = 0x8000000;
3080 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3081 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3082 @}
3083 @end smallexample
3084
3085 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3086 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3087 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3088
3089 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3090 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3091 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3092 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3093 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3094 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3095 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3096
3097 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3098 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3099 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3100 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3101 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3102 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3103
3104 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3105 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3106 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3107
3108 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3109 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3110 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3111 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3112 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3113 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3114 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3115
3116 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3117 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3118 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3119 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3120 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3121 sections.
3122
3123 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3124
3125 @node Simple Commands
3126 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3127 @cindex linker script simple commands
3128 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3129
3130 @menu
3131 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3132 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3133 @ifclear SingleFormat
3134 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3135 @end ifclear
3136
3137 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3138 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3139 @end menu
3140
3141 @node Entry Point
3142 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3143 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3144 @cindex start of execution
3145 @cindex first instruction
3146 @cindex entry point
3147 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3148 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3149 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3150 @smallexample
3151 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3152 @end smallexample
3153
3154 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3155 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3156 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3157 @itemize @bullet
3158 @item
3159 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3160 @item
3161 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3162 @item
3163 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3164 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3165 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3166 @item
3167 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3168 @item
3169 The address @code{0}.
3170 @end itemize
3171
3172 @node File Commands
3173 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3174 @cindex linker script file commands
3175 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3176
3177 @table @code
3178 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3179 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3180 @cindex including a linker script
3181 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3182 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3183 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3184 10 levels deep.
3185
3186 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3187 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3188
3189 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3190 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3191 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3192 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3193 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3194 @cindex linker script input object files
3195 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3196 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3197
3198 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3199 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3200 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3201
3202 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3203 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3204
3205 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3206 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3207 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3208 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3209 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3210 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3211 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3212 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3213 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3214
3215 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3216 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3217 @samp{-l}.
3218
3219 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3220 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3221 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3222
3223 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3224 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3225 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3226 @cindex grouping input files
3227 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3228 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3229 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3230 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3231
3232 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3233 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3234 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3235 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3236 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3237 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3238 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3239 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3240 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3241 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3242 setting afterwards.
3243
3244 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3245 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3246 @cindex output file name in linker script
3247 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3248 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3249 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3250 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3251 precedence.
3252
3253 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3254 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3255
3256 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3257 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3258 @cindex library search path in linker script
3259 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3260 @cindex search path in linker script
3261 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3262 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3263 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3264 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3265 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3266 the command line option are searched first.
3267
3268 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3269 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3270 @cindex first input file
3271 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3272 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3273 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3274 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3275 first file.
3276 @end table
3277
3278 @ifclear SingleFormat
3279 @node Format Commands
3280 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3281 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3282
3283 @table @code
3284 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3285 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3286 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3287 @cindex output file format in linker script
3288 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3289 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3290 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3291 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3292 line option takes precedence.
3293
3294 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3295 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3296 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3297 desired endianness.
3298
3299 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3300 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3301 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3302 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3303
3304 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3305 command:
3306 @smallexample
3307 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3308 @end smallexample
3309 This says that the default format for the output file is
3310 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3311 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3312 format.
3313
3314 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3315 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3316 @cindex input file format in linker script
3317 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3318 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3319 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3320 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3321 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3322 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3323 @end table
3324 @end ifclear
3325
3326 @node REGION_ALIAS
3327 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3328 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3329 @cindex region alias
3330 @cindex region names
3331
3332 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3333 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3334
3335 @smallexample
3336 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3337 @end smallexample
3338
3339 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3340 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3341 to memory regions. An example follows.
3342
3343 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3344 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3345 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3346 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3347 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3348 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3349 sections:
3350
3351 @itemize @bullet
3352 @item
3353 @code{.text} program code;
3354 @item
3355 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3356 @item
3357 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3358 @item
3359 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3360 @end itemize
3361
3362 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3363 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3364 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3365 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3366 @code{C}:
3367 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3368 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3369 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3370 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3371 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3372 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3373 @end multitable
3374 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3375 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3376 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3377 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3378
3379 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3380 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3381 memory layout:
3382 @smallexample
3383 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3384
3385 SECTIONS
3386 @{
3387 .text :
3388 @{
3389 *(.text)
3390 @} > REGION_TEXT
3391 .rodata :
3392 @{
3393 *(.rodata)
3394 rodata_end = .;
3395 @} > REGION_RODATA
3396 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3397 @{
3398 data_start = .;
3399 *(.data)
3400 @} > REGION_DATA
3401 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3402 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3403 .bss :
3404 @{
3405 *(.bss)
3406 @} > REGION_BSS
3407 @}
3408 @end smallexample
3409
3410 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3411 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3412 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3413 @table @code
3414 @item A
3415 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3416 @smallexample
3417 MEMORY
3418 @{
3419 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3420 @}
3421
3422 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3423 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3424 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3425 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3426 @end smallexample
3427 @item B
3428 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3429 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3430 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3431 @smallexample
3432 MEMORY
3433 @{
3434 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3435 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3436 @}
3437
3438 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3439 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3440 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3441 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3442 @end smallexample
3443 @item C
3444 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3445 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3446 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3447 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3448 @smallexample
3449 MEMORY
3450 @{
3451 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3452 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3453 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3454 @}
3455
3456 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3457 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3458 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3459 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3460 @end smallexample
3461 @end table
3462
3463 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3464 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3465 necessary:
3466 @smallexample
3467 #include <string.h>
3468
3469 extern char data_start [];
3470 extern char data_size [];
3471 extern char data_load_start [];
3472
3473 void copy_data(void)
3474 @{
3475 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3476 @{
3477 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3478 @}
3479 @}
3480 @end smallexample
3481
3482 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3483 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3484 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3485
3486 @table @code
3487 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3488 @kindex ASSERT
3489 @cindex assertion in linker script
3490 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3491 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3492
3493 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3494 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3495 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3496 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3497 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3498
3499 @smallexample
3500 .stack :
3501 @{
3502 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3503 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3504 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3505 @}
3506 @end smallexample
3507
3508 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3509 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3510 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3511
3512 @smallexample
3513 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3514 .stack :
3515 @{
3516 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3517 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3518 @}
3519 @end smallexample
3520
3521 will work.
3522
3523 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3524 @kindex EXTERN
3525 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3526 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3527 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3528 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3529 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3530 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3531
3532 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3533 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3534 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3535 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3536 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3537 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3538
3539 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3540 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3541 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3542 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3543 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3544 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3545
3546 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3547 @kindex INSERT
3548 @cindex insert user script into default script
3549 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3550 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3551 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3552 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3553 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3554 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3555 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3556 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3557 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3558 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3559 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3560 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3561 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3562
3563 @smallexample
3564 SECTIONS
3565 @{
3566 OVERLAY :
3567 @{
3568 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3569 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3570 @}
3571 @}
3572 INSERT AFTER .text;
3573 @end smallexample
3574
3575 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3576 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3577 @cindex cross references
3578 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3579 references among certain output sections.
3580
3581 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3582 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3583 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3584 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3585 a function defined in the other section.
3586
3587 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3588 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3589 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3590 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3591 names.
3592
3593 @ifclear SingleFormat
3594 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3595 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3596 @cindex machine architecture
3597 @cindex architecture
3598 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3599 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3600 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3601 the @samp{-f} option.
3602 @end ifclear
3603
3604 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3605 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3606 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3607 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3608 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3609 @xref{Expression Section}.
3610 @end table
3611
3612 @node Assignments
3613 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3614 @cindex assignment in scripts
3615 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3616 @cindex variables, defining
3617 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3618 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3619
3620 @menu
3621 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3622 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3623 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3624 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3625 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3626 @end menu
3627
3628 @node Simple Assignments
3629 @subsection Simple Assignments
3630
3631 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3632
3633 @table @code
3634 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3635 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3636 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3637 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3638 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3639 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3640 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3641 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3642 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3643 @end table
3644
3645 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3646 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3647 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3648
3649 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3650 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3651
3652 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3653
3654 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3655
3656 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3657 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3658 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3659
3660 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3661 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3662
3663 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3664 assignments may be used:
3665
3666 @smallexample
3667 floating_point = 0;
3668 SECTIONS
3669 @{
3670 .text :
3671 @{
3672 *(.text)
3673 _etext = .;
3674 @}
3675 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3676 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3677 @}
3678 @end smallexample
3679 @noindent
3680 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3681 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3682 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3683 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3684 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3685
3686 @node HIDDEN
3687 @subsection HIDDEN
3688 @cindex HIDDEN
3689 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3690 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3691
3692 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3693 @code{HIDDEN}:
3694
3695 @smallexample
3696 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3697 SECTIONS
3698 @{
3699 .text :
3700 @{
3701 *(.text)
3702 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3703 @}
3704 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3705 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3706 @}
3707 @end smallexample
3708 @noindent
3709 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3710
3711 @node PROVIDE
3712 @subsection PROVIDE
3713 @cindex PROVIDE
3714 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3715 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3716 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3717 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3718 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3719 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3720 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3721 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3722
3723 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3724 @smallexample
3725 SECTIONS
3726 @{
3727 .text :
3728 @{
3729 *(.text)
3730 _etext = .;
3731 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3732 @}
3733 @}
3734 @end smallexample
3735
3736 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3737 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3738 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3739 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3740 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3741 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3742
3743 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3744 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3745 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3746 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3747 hidden and won't be exported.
3748
3749 @node Source Code Reference
3750 @subsection Source Code Reference
3751
3752 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3753 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3754 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3755 symbol that does not have a value.
3756
3757 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3758 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3759 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3760 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3761 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3762 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3763 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3764 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3765
3766 @smallexample
3767 extern int foo;
3768 @end smallexample
3769
3770 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3771
3772 @smallexample
3773 _foo = 1000;
3774 @end smallexample
3775
3776 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3777 transformation has taken place.
3778
3779 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3780 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3781 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3782 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3783 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3784 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3785 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3786
3787 @smallexample
3788 int foo = 1000;
3789 @end smallexample
3790
3791 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3792 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3793 number 1000 is initially stored.
3794
3795 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3796 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3797 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3798 So:
3799
3800 @smallexample
3801 foo = 1;
3802 @end smallexample
3803
3804 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3805 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3806 address. Whereas:
3807
3808 @smallexample
3809 int * a = & foo;
3810 @end smallexample
3811
3812 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3813 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3814 the variable @samp{a}.
3815
3816 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3817 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3818 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3819
3820 @smallexample
3821 foo = 1000;
3822 @end smallexample
3823
3824 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3825 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3826 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3827 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3828 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3829
3830 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3831 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3832 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3833 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3834 linker script contains these declarations:
3835
3836 @smallexample
3837 @group
3838 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3839 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3840 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3841 @end group
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3845
3846 @smallexample
3847 @group
3848 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3849
3850 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3851 @end group
3852 @end smallexample
3853
3854 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3855
3856 @node SECTIONS
3857 @section SECTIONS Command
3858 @kindex SECTIONS
3859 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3860 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3861
3862 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3863 @smallexample
3864 SECTIONS
3865 @{
3866 @var{sections-command}
3867 @var{sections-command}
3868 @dots{}
3869 @}
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3873
3874 @itemize @bullet
3875 @item
3876 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3877 @item
3878 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3879 @item
3880 an output section description
3881 @item
3882 an overlay description
3883 @end itemize
3884
3885 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3886 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3887 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3888 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3889 the layout of the output file.
3890
3891 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3892 below.
3893
3894 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3895 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3896 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3897 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3898 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3899 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3900
3901 @menu
3902 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3903 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3904 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3905 * Input Section:: Input section description
3906 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3907 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3908 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3909 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3910 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3911 @end menu
3912
3913 @node Output Section Description
3914 @subsection Output Section Description
3915 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3916 @smallexample
3917 @group
3918 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3919 [AT(@var{lma})]
3920 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3921 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3922 [@var{constraint}]
3923 @{
3924 @var{output-section-command}
3925 @var{output-section-command}
3926 @dots{}
3927 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3928 @end group
3929 @end smallexample
3930
3931 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3932
3933 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3934 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3935 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3936 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3937 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3938
3939 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3940
3941 @itemize @bullet
3942 @item
3943 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3944 @item
3945 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3946 @item
3947 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3948 @item
3949 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3950 @end itemize
3951
3952 @node Output Section Name
3953 @subsection Output Section Name
3954 @cindex name, section
3955 @cindex section name
3956 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3957 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3958 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3959 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3960 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3961 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3962 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3963 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3964 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3965 commas must be quoted.
3966
3967 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3968 Discarding}.
3969
3970 @node Output Section Address
3971 @subsection Output Section Address
3972 @cindex address, section
3973 @cindex section address
3974 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3975 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3976 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3977
3978 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3979 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3980 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3981 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3982 contained within the output section.
3983
3984 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3985
3986 @itemize @bullet
3987 @item
3988 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3989 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3990 in that region.
3991
3992 @item
3993 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3994 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3995 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3996 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3997
3998 @item
3999 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4000 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4001 counter.
4002 @end itemize
4003
4004 @noindent
4005 For example:
4006
4007 @smallexample
4008 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4009 @end smallexample
4010
4011 @noindent
4012 and
4013
4014 @smallexample
4015 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4016 @end smallexample
4017
4018 @noindent
4019 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4020 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4021 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4022 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4023 input sections.
4024
4025 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4026 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4027 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4028 do something like this:
4029 @smallexample
4030 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4031 @end smallexample
4032 @noindent
4033 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4034 aligned upward to the specified value.
4035
4036 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4037 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4038 sections are ignored).
4039
4040 @node Input Section
4041 @subsection Input Section Description
4042 @cindex input sections
4043 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4044 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4045
4046 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4047 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4048 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4049 map the input files into your memory layout.
4050
4051 @menu
4052 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4053 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4054 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4055 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4056 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4057 @end menu
4058
4059 @node Input Section Basics
4060 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4061 @cindex input section basics
4062 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4063 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4064
4065 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4066 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4067
4068 The most common input section description is to include all input
4069 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4070 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4071 @smallexample
4072 *(.text)
4073 @end smallexample
4074 @noindent
4075 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4076 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4077 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4078 example:
4079 @smallexample
4080 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4081 @end smallexample
4082 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4083 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4084
4085 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4086 @smallexample
4087 *(.text .rdata)
4088 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4089 @end smallexample
4090 @noindent
4091 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4092 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4093 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4094 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4095 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4096 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4097
4098 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4099 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4100 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4101 @smallexample
4102 data.o(.data)
4103 @end smallexample
4104
4105 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4106 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4107
4108 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4109
4110 @smallexample
4111 @group
4112 SECTIONS @{
4113 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4114 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4115 @}
4116 @end group
4117 @end smallexample
4118
4119 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4120 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4121 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4122 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4123 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4124
4125 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4126 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4127 with no whitespace around the colon.
4128
4129 @table @samp
4130 @item archive:file
4131 matches file within archive
4132 @item archive:
4133 matches the whole archive
4134 @item :file
4135 matches file but not one in an archive
4136 @end table
4137
4138 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4139 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4140 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4141 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4142 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4143 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4144 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4145 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4146 command.
4147
4148 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4149 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4150 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4151 @smallexample
4152 data.o
4153 @end smallexample
4154
4155 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4156 and does not contain any wild card
4157 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4158 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4159 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4160 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4161 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4162 the archive search path.
4163
4164 @node Input Section Wildcards
4165 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4166 @cindex input section wildcards
4167 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4168 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4169 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4170 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4171 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4172
4173 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4174 pattern for the file name.
4175
4176 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4177
4178 @table @samp
4179 @item *
4180 matches any number of characters
4181 @item ?
4182 matches any single character
4183 @item [@var{chars}]
4184 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4185 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4186 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4187 @item \
4188 quotes the following character
4189 @end table
4190
4191 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4192 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4193 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4194 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4195 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4196 a @samp{/} character.
4197
4198 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4199 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4200 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4201
4202 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4203 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4204 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4205 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4206 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4207 @smallexample
4208 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4209 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4210 @end smallexample
4211
4212 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4213 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4214 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4215 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4216 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4217 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4218 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4219
4220 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4221 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4222 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4223 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4224 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4225 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4226
4227 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4228 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4229 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4230 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4231 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4232
4233 @cindex SORT
4234 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4235
4236 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4237 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4238
4239 @enumerate
4240 @item
4241 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4242 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4243 sections have the same name.
4244 @item
4245 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4246 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4247 sections have the same alignment.
4248 @item
4249 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4250 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4251 @item
4252 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4253 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4254 @item
4255 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4256 @end enumerate
4257
4258 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4259 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4260 takes precedence over the command line option.
4261
4262 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4263 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4264 treated as nested sorting command.
4265
4266 @enumerate
4267 @item
4268 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4269 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4270 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4271 @item
4272 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4273 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4274 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4275 @end enumerate
4276
4277 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4278 command line option will be ignored.
4279
4280 @cindex SORT_NONE
4281 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4282 section sorting option.
4283
4284 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4285 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4286 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4287
4288 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4289 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4290 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4291 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4292 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4293 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4294 @smallexample
4295 @group
4296 SECTIONS @{
4297 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4298 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4299 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4300 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4301 @}
4302 @end group
4303 @end smallexample
4304
4305 @node Input Section Common
4306 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4307 @cindex common symbol placement
4308 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4309 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4310 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4311 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4312 named @samp{COMMON}.
4313
4314 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4315 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4316 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4317 input files are placed in another section.
4318
4319 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4320 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4321 @smallexample
4322 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4323 @end smallexample
4324
4325 @cindex scommon section
4326 @cindex small common symbols
4327 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4328 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4329 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4330 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4331 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4332 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4333 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4334 locations.
4335
4336 @cindex [COMMON]
4337 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4338 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4339 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4340
4341 @node Input Section Keep
4342 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4343 @cindex KEEP
4344 @cindex garbage collection
4345 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4346 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4347 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4348 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4349 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4350
4351 @node Input Section Example
4352 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4353 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4354 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4355 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4356 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4357 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4358 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4359 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4360 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4361 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4362
4363 @smallexample
4364 @group
4365 SECTIONS @{
4366 outputa 0x10000 :
4367 @{
4368 all.o
4369 foo.o (.input1)
4370 @}
4371 @end group
4372 @group
4373 outputb :
4374 @{
4375 foo.o (.input2)
4376 foo1.o (.input1)
4377 @}
4378 @end group
4379 @group
4380 outputc :
4381 @{
4382 *(.input1)
4383 *(.input2)
4384 @}
4385 @}
4386 @end group
4387 @end smallexample
4388
4389 @node Output Section Data
4390 @subsection Output Section Data
4391 @cindex data
4392 @cindex section data
4393 @cindex output section data
4394 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4395 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4396 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4397 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4398 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4399 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4400 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4401 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4402 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4403 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4404 counter.
4405
4406 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4407 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4408 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4409 stored.
4410
4411 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4412 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4413 @smallexample
4414 BYTE(1)
4415 LONG(addr)
4416 @end smallexample
4417
4418 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4419 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4420 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4421 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4422 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4423
4424 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4425 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4426 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4427 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4428 endianness of the first input object file.
4429
4430 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4431 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4432 @smallexample
4433 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4434 @end smallexample
4435 whereas this will work:
4436 @smallexample
4437 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4438 @end smallexample
4439
4440 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4441 @cindex holes, filling
4442 @cindex unspecified memory
4443 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4444 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4445 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4446 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4447 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4448 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4449 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4450 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4451 different parts of an output section.
4452
4453 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4454 value @samp{0x90}:
4455 @smallexample
4456 FILL(0x90909090)
4457 @end smallexample
4458
4459 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4460 section attribute, but it only affects the
4461 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4462 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4463 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4464 expression.
4465
4466 @node Output Section Keywords
4467 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4468 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4469 commands.
4470
4471 @table @code
4472 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4473 @cindex input filename symbols
4474 @cindex filename symbols
4475 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4476 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4477 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4478 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4479 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4480
4481 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4482 normally used for any other object file format.
4483
4484 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4485 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4486 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4487 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4488 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4489 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4490 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4491 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4492 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4493 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4494 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4495 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4496 ignored for other object file formats.
4497
4498 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4499 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4500 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4501 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4502 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4503 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4504 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4505 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4506 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4507 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4508 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4509 @code{exit}.
4510
4511 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4512 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4513 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4514 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4515 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4516 runtime code expects to see.
4517
4518 @smallexample
4519 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4520 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4521 *(.ctors)
4522 LONG(0)
4523 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4524 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4525 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4526 *(.dtors)
4527 LONG(0)
4528 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4529 @end smallexample
4530
4531 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4532 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4533 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4534 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4535 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4536 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4537 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4538 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4539
4540 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4541 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4542 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4543 scripts.
4544
4545 @end table
4546
4547 @node Output Section Discarding
4548 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4549 @cindex discarding sections
4550 @cindex sections, discarding
4551 @cindex removing sections
4552 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4553 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4554 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4555 @smallexample
4556 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4557 @end smallexample
4558 @noindent
4559 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4560 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4561 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4562 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4563 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4564 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4565 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4566 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4567 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4568
4569 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4570 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4571 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4572 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4573 section is discarded.
4574
4575 @cindex /DISCARD/
4576 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4577 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4578 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4579
4580 @node Output Section Attributes
4581 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4582 @cindex output section attributes
4583 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4584 like this:
4585
4586 @smallexample
4587 @group
4588 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4589 [AT(@var{lma})]
4590 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4591 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4592 [@var{constraint}]
4593 @{
4594 @var{output-section-command}
4595 @var{output-section-command}
4596 @dots{}
4597 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4598 @end group
4599 @end smallexample
4600
4601 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4602 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4603 remaining section attributes.
4604
4605 @menu
4606 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4607 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4608 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4609 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4610 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4611 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4612 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4613 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4614 @end menu
4615
4616 @node Output Section Type
4617 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4618 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4619 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4620
4621 @table @code
4622 @item NOLOAD
4623 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4624 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4625 @item DSECT
4626 @itemx COPY
4627 @itemx INFO
4628 @itemx OVERLAY
4629 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4630 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4631 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4632 section when the program is run.
4633 @end table
4634
4635 @kindex NOLOAD
4636 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4637 @cindex loading, preventing
4638 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4639 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4640 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4641 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4642 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4643 @smallexample
4644 @group
4645 SECTIONS @{
4646 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4647 @dots{}
4648 @}
4649 @end group
4650 @end smallexample
4651
4652 @node Output Section LMA
4653 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4654 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4655 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4656 @cindex load address
4657 @cindex section load address
4658 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4659 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4660 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4661 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4662 address is optional.
4663
4664 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4665 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4666 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4667 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4668 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4669
4670 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4671 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4672 load address:
4673
4674 @itemize @bullet
4675 @item
4676 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4677 the LMA address as well.
4678
4679 @item
4680 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4681
4682 @item
4683 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4684 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4685 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4686 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4687 the last section in the located region.
4688
4689 @item
4690 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4691 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4692
4693 @item
4694 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4695 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4696 @end itemize
4697
4698 @cindex ROM initialized data
4699 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4700 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4701 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4702 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4703 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4704 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4705 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4706 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4707 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4708
4709 @smallexample
4710 @group
4711 SECTIONS
4712 @{
4713 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4714 .mdata 0x2000 :
4715 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4716 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4717 .bss 0x3000 :
4718 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4719 @}
4720 @end group
4721 @end smallexample
4722
4723 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4724 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4725 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4726 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4727 script.
4728
4729 @smallexample
4730 @group
4731 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4732 char *src = &_etext;
4733 char *dst = &_data;
4734
4735 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4736 while (dst < &_edata)
4737 *dst++ = *src++;
4738
4739 /* Zero bss. */
4740 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4741 *dst = 0;
4742 @end group
4743 @end smallexample
4744
4745 @node Forced Output Alignment
4746 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4747 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4748 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4749 @cindex output section alignment
4750 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4751 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4752 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4753
4754 @node Forced Input Alignment
4755 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4756 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4757 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4758 @cindex input section alignment
4759 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4760 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4761 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4762
4763 @node Output Section Constraint
4764 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4765 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4766 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4767 @cindex constraints on output sections
4768 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4769 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4770 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4771 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4772
4773 @node Output Section Region
4774 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4775 @kindex >@var{region}
4776 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4777 @cindex memory regions and sections
4778 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4779 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4780
4781 Here is a simple example:
4782 @smallexample
4783 @group
4784 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4785 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4786 @end group
4787 @end smallexample
4788
4789 @node Output Section Phdr
4790 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4791 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4792 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4793 @cindex program headers and sections
4794 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4795 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4796 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4797 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4798 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4799 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4800
4801 Here is a simple example:
4802 @smallexample
4803 @group
4804 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4805 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4806 @end group
4807 @end smallexample
4808
4809 @node Output Section Fill
4810 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4811 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4812 @cindex section fill pattern
4813 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4814 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4815 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4816 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4817 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4818 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4819 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4820 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4821 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4822 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4823 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4824 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4825 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4826
4827 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4828 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4829
4830 Here is a simple example:
4831 @smallexample
4832 @group
4833 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4834 @end group
4835 @end smallexample
4836
4837 @node Overlay Description
4838 @subsection Overlay Description
4839 @kindex OVERLAY
4840 @cindex overlays
4841 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4842 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4843 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4844 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4845 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4846 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4847 than another.
4848
4849 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4850 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4851 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4852 command is as follows:
4853 @smallexample
4854 @group
4855 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4856 @{
4857 @var{secname1}
4858 @{
4859 @var{output-section-command}
4860 @var{output-section-command}
4861 @dots{}
4862 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4863 @var{secname2}
4864 @{
4865 @var{output-section-command}
4866 @var{output-section-command}
4867 @dots{}
4868 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4869 @dots{}
4870 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4871 @end group
4872 @end smallexample
4873
4874 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4875 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4876 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4877 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4878 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4879 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4880
4881 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4882 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4883
4884 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4885 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4886 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4887 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4888 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4889 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4890
4891 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4892 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4893 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4894 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4895 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4896
4897 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4898 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4899 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4900 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4901 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4902 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4903 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4904
4905 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4906 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4907
4908 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4909 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4910 @smallexample
4911 @group
4912 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4913 @{
4914 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4915 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4916 @}
4917 @end group
4918 @end smallexample
4919 @noindent
4920 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4921 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4922 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4923 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4924 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4925 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4926
4927 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4928 like the following.
4929
4930 @smallexample
4931 @group
4932 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4933 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4934 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4935 @end group
4936 @end smallexample
4937
4938 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4939 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4940 example could have been written identically as follows.
4941
4942 @smallexample
4943 @group
4944 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4945 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4946 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4947 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4948 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4949 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4950 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4951 @end group
4952 @end smallexample
4953
4954 @node MEMORY
4955 @section MEMORY Command
4956 @kindex MEMORY
4957 @cindex memory regions
4958 @cindex regions of memory
4959 @cindex allocating memory
4960 @cindex discontinuous memory
4961 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4962 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4963
4964 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4965 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4966 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4967 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4968 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4969 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4970 around to fit into the available regions.
4971
4972 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4973 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4974 you wish. The syntax is:
4975 @smallexample
4976 @group
4977 MEMORY
4978 @{
4979 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4980 @dots{}
4981 @}
4982 @end group
4983 @end smallexample
4984
4985 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4986 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4987 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4988 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4989 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4990 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4991 command.
4992
4993 @cindex memory region attributes
4994 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4995 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4996 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4997 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4998 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4999 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5000 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5001
5002 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5003 @table @samp
5004 @item R
5005 Read-only section
5006 @item W
5007 Read/write section
5008 @item X
5009 Executable section
5010 @item A
5011 Allocatable section
5012 @item I
5013 Initialized section
5014 @item L
5015 Same as @samp{I}
5016 @item !
5017 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5018 @end table
5019
5020 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5021 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5022 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5023 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5024 attributes.
5025
5026 @kindex ORIGIN =
5027 @kindex o =
5028 @kindex org =
5029 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5030 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5031 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5032 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5033 @code{ORG}).
5034
5035 @kindex LENGTH =
5036 @kindex len =
5037 @kindex l =
5038 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5039 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5040 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5041 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5042
5043 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5044 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5045 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5046 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5047 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5048 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5049 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5050 region.
5051
5052 @smallexample
5053 @group
5054 MEMORY
5055 @{
5056 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5057 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5058 @}
5059 @end group
5060 @end smallexample
5061
5062 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5063 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5064 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5065 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5066 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5067 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5068 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5069 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5070 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5071
5072 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5073 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5074 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5075
5076 @smallexample
5077 @group
5078 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5079 @end group
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 @node PHDRS
5083 @section PHDRS Command
5084 @kindex PHDRS
5085 @cindex program headers
5086 @cindex ELF program headers
5087 @cindex program segments
5088 @cindex segments, ELF
5089 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5090 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5091 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5092 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5093
5094 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5095 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5096 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5097 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5098 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5099
5100 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5101 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5102 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5103 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5104 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5105
5106 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5107 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5108 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5109
5110 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5111 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5112
5113 @smallexample
5114 @group
5115 PHDRS
5116 @{
5117 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5118 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5119 @}
5120 @end group
5121 @end smallexample
5122
5123 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5124 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5125 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5126 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5127 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5128 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5129
5130 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5131 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5132 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5133 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5134 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5135 Section Phdr}.
5136
5137 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5138 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5139 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5140 contain the section.
5141
5142 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5143 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5144 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5145 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5146 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5147 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5148 segment at all.
5149
5150 @kindex FILEHDR
5151 @kindex PHDRS
5152 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5153 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5154 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5155 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5156 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5157 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5158 these keywords.
5159
5160 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5161 value of the keyword.
5162
5163 @table @asis
5164 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5165 Indicates an unused program header.
5166
5167 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5168 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5169 the file.
5170
5171 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5172 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5173
5174 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5175 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5176 found.
5177
5178 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5179 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5180
5181 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5182 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5183 ABI.
5184
5185 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5186 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5187
5188 @item @var{expression}
5189 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5190 be used for types not defined above.
5191 @end table
5192
5193 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5194 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5195 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5196 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5197 output section attribute.
5198
5199 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5200 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5201 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5202 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5203 header.
5204
5205 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5206 headers used on a native ELF system.
5207
5208 @example
5209 @group
5210 PHDRS
5211 @{
5212 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5213 interp PT_INTERP ;
5214 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5215 data PT_LOAD ;
5216 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5217 @}
5218
5219 SECTIONS
5220 @{
5221 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5222 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5223 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5224 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5225 @dots{}
5226 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5227 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5228 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5229 @dots{}
5230 @}
5231 @end group
5232 @end example
5233
5234 @node VERSION
5235 @section VERSION Command
5236 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5237 @cindex symbol versions
5238 @cindex version script
5239 @cindex versions of symbols
5240 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5241 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5242 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5243 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5244 shared library.
5245
5246 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5247 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5248 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5249
5250 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5251 @smallexample
5252 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5253 @end smallexample
5254
5255 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5256 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5257 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5258 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5259 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5260 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5261 library.
5262
5263 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5264 examples.
5265
5266 @smallexample
5267 VERS_1.1 @{
5268 global:
5269 foo1;
5270 local:
5271 old*;
5272 original*;
5273 new*;
5274 @};
5275
5276 VERS_1.2 @{
5277 foo2;
5278 @} VERS_1.1;
5279
5280 VERS_2.0 @{
5281 bar1; bar2;
5282 extern "C++" @{
5283 ns::*;
5284 "f(int, double)";
5285 @};
5286 @} VERS_1.2;
5287 @end smallexample
5288
5289 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5290 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5291 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5292 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5293 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5294 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5295 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5296 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5297 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5298 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5299
5300 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5301 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5302 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5303
5304 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5305 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5306 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5307
5308 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5309 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5310 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5311 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5312 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5313 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5314 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5315 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5316 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5317
5318 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5319 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5320 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5321 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5322
5323 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5324 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5325 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5326 won't.
5327
5328 @smallexample
5329 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5330 @end smallexample
5331
5332 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5333 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5334 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5335 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5336 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5337 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5338 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5339 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5340 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5341 search for each symbol reference.
5342
5343 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5344 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5345 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5346 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5347 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5348 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5349 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5350 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5351 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5352
5353 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5354 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5355 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5356 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5357 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5358 @smallexample
5359 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5360 @end smallexample
5361 @noindent
5362 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5363 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5364 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5365 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5366 takes precedence over a version script.
5367
5368 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5369 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5370 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5371 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5372 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5373
5374 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5375 source file. Here is an example:
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5379 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5380 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5381 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5382 @end smallexample
5383
5384 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5385 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5386 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5387 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5388
5389 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5390 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5391 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5392 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5393 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5394 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5395
5396 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5397 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5398 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5399 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5400
5401 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5402
5403 @smallexample
5404 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5405 @end smallexample
5406
5407 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5408 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5409 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5410 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5411 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5412
5413 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5414 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5415 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5416 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5417 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5418 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5419 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5420 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5421 expect when you upgrade.
5422
5423 @node Expressions
5424 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5425 @cindex expressions
5426 @cindex arithmetic
5427 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5428 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5429 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5430 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5431
5432 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5433
5434 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5435 expressions.
5436
5437 @menu
5438 * Constants:: Constants
5439 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5440 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5441 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5442 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5443 * Operators:: Operators
5444 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5445 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5446 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5447 @end menu
5448
5449 @node Constants
5450 @subsection Constants
5451 @cindex integer notation
5452 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5453 All constants are integers.
5454
5455 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5456 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5457 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5458 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5459 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5460 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5461
5462 @cindex scaled integers
5463 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5464 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5465 @cindex suffixes for integers
5466 @cindex integer suffixes
5467 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5468 constant by
5469 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5470 @ifnottex
5471 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5472 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5473 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5474 @end ifnottex
5475 @tex
5476 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5477 @end tex
5478 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5479 respectively. For example, the following
5480 all refer to the same quantity:
5481
5482 @smallexample
5483 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5484 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5485 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5486 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5487 @end smallexample
5488
5489 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5490 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5491
5492 @node Symbolic Constants
5493 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5494 @cindex symbolic constants
5495 @kindex CONSTANT
5496 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5497 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5498
5499 @table @code
5500 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5501 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5502 The target's maximum page size.
5503
5504 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5505 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5506 The target's default page size.
5507 @end table
5508
5509 So for example:
5510
5511 @smallexample
5512 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5513 @end smallexample
5514
5515 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5516 supported by the target.
5517
5518 @node Symbols
5519 @subsection Symbol Names
5520 @cindex symbol names
5521 @cindex names
5522 @cindex quoted symbol names
5523 @kindex "
5524 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5525 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5526 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5527 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5528 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5529 @smallexample
5530 "SECTION" = 9;
5531 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5532 @end smallexample
5533
5534 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5535 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5536 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5537
5538 @node Orphan Sections
5539 @subsection Orphan Sections
5540 @cindex orphan
5541 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5542 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5543 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5544 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5545 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5546 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5547 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5548 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5549 at the end of the file.
5550
5551 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5552 well as section flag.
5553
5554 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5555 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5556 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5557 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5558 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5559 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5560 character.
5561
5562 @node Location Counter
5563 @subsection The Location Counter
5564 @kindex .
5565 @cindex dot
5566 @cindex location counter
5567 @cindex current output location
5568 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5569 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5570 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5571 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5572 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5573
5574 @cindex holes
5575 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5576 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5577 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5578 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5579 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5580
5581 @smallexample
5582 SECTIONS
5583 @{
5584 output :
5585 @{
5586 file1(.text)
5587 . = . + 1000;
5588 file2(.text)
5589 . += 1000;
5590 file3(.text)
5591 @} = 0x12345678;
5592 @}
5593 @end smallexample
5594 @noindent
5595 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5596 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5597 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5598 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5599 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5600 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5601
5602 @cindex dot inside sections
5603 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5604 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5605 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5606 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5607 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5608 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5609
5610 @smallexample
5611 SECTIONS
5612 @{
5613 . = 0x100
5614 .text: @{
5615 *(.text)
5616 . = 0x200
5617 @}
5618 . = 0x500
5619 .data: @{
5620 *(.data)
5621 . += 0x600
5622 @}
5623 @}
5624 @end smallexample
5625
5626 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5627 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5628 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5629 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5630 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5631 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5632 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5633 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5634
5635 @cindex dot outside sections
5636 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5637 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5638 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5639
5640 @smallexample
5641 SECTIONS
5642 @{
5643 start_of_text = . ;
5644 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5645 end_of_text = . ;
5646
5647 start_of_data = . ;
5648 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5649 end_of_data = . ;
5650 @}
5651 @end smallexample
5652
5653 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5654 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5655 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5656 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5657 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5658 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5659 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5660 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5661 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5662 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5663 as follows:
5664
5665 @smallexample
5666 SECTIONS
5667 @{
5668 start_of_text = . ;
5669 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5670 end_of_text = . ;
5671
5672 start_of_data = . ;
5673 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5674 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5675 end_of_data = . ;
5676 @}
5677 @end smallexample
5678
5679 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5680 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5681 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5682 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5683 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5684 section. So you could write:
5685
5686 @smallexample
5687 SECTIONS
5688 @{
5689 start_of_text = . ;
5690 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5691 end_of_text = . ;
5692
5693 . = . ;
5694 start_of_data = . ;
5695 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5696 end_of_data = . ;
5697 @}
5698 @end smallexample
5699
5700 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5701 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5702
5703 @need 2000
5704 @node Operators
5705 @subsection Operators
5706 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5707 @cindex arithmetic operators
5708 @cindex precedence in expressions
5709 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5710 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5711 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5712 @ifnottex
5713 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5714 @smallexample
5715 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5716 (highest)
5717 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5718 2 left * / %
5719 3 left + -
5720 4 left >> <<
5721 5 left == != > < <= >=
5722 6 left &
5723 7 left |
5724 8 left &&
5725 9 left ||
5726 10 right ? :
5727 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5728 (lowest)
5729 @end smallexample
5730 Notes:
5731 (1) Prefix operators
5732 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5733 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5734 @end ifnottex
5735 @tex
5736 \vskip \baselineskip
5737 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5738 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5739 \hrule
5740 \halign
5741 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5742 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5743 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5744 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5745 \noalign{\hrule}
5746 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5747 &highest&&&&&\cr
5748 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5749 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5750 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5751 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5752 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5753 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5754 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5755 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5756 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5757 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5758 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5759 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5760 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5761 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5762 \hrule}
5763 @end tex
5764 @iftex
5765 {
5766 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5767 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5768 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5769 }
5770 @end iftex
5771 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5772
5773 @node Evaluation
5774 @subsection Evaluation
5775 @cindex lazy evaluation
5776 @cindex expression evaluation order
5777 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5778 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5779
5780 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5781 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5782 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5783 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5784
5785 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5786 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5787 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5788 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5789
5790 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5791 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5792 allocation.
5793
5794 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5795 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5796
5797 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5798 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5799 following
5800 @smallexample
5801 @group
5802 SECTIONS
5803 @{
5804 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5805 @{ *(.text) @}
5806 @}
5807 @end group
5808 @end smallexample
5809 @noindent
5810 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5811 address}.
5812
5813 @node Expression Section
5814 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5815 @cindex expression sections
5816 @cindex absolute expressions
5817 @cindex relative expressions
5818 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5819 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5820 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5821 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5822 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5823 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5824 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5825 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5826 operations.
5827
5828 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5829 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5830 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5831 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5832 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5833 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5834 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5835 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5836 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5837 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5838 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5839 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5840 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5841 everywhere.
5842
5843 In the following simple example,
5844
5845 @smallexample
5846 @group
5847 SECTIONS
5848 @{
5849 . = 0x100;
5850 __executable_start = 0x100;
5851 .data :
5852 @{
5853 . = 0x10;
5854 __data_start = 0x10;
5855 *(.data)
5856 @}
5857 @dots{}
5858 @}
5859 @end group
5860 @end smallexample
5861
5862 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5863 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5864 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5865 section in the second two assignments.
5866
5867 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5868 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5869
5870 @itemize @bullet
5871 @item
5872 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5873 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5874 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5875 @item
5876 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5877 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5878 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5879 @item
5880 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5881 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5882 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5883 before applying the operator.
5884 @end itemize
5885
5886 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5887
5888 @itemize @bullet
5889 @item
5890 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5891 @item
5892 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5893 @item
5894 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5895 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5896 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5897 @item
5898 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5899 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5900 section as the relative operand(s).
5901 @item
5902 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5903 conversions) is an absolute address.
5904 @end itemize
5905
5906 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5907 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5908 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5909 section @samp{.data}:
5910 @smallexample
5911 SECTIONS
5912 @{
5913 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5914 @}
5915 @end smallexample
5916 @noindent
5917 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5918 @samp{.data} section.
5919
5920 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5921 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5922
5923 @node Builtin Functions
5924 @subsection Builtin Functions
5925 @cindex functions in expressions
5926 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5927 use in linker script expressions.
5928
5929 @table @code
5930 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5931 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5932 @cindex expression, absolute
5933 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5934 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5935 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5936 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5937
5938 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5939 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5940 @cindex section address in expression
5941 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5942 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5943 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5944 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5945 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5946 the other two will be absolute:
5947 @smallexample
5948 @group
5949 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5950 .output1 :
5951 @{
5952 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5953 @dots{}
5954 @}
5955 .output :
5956 @{
5957 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5958 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5959 @}
5960 @dots{} @}
5961 @end group
5962 @end smallexample
5963
5964 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5965 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5966 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5967 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5968 @cindex round up location counter
5969 @cindex align location counter
5970 @cindex round up expression
5971 @cindex align expression
5972 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5973 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5974 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5975 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5976 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5977 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5978
5979 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5980 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5981 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5982 input sections:
5983 @smallexample
5984 @group
5985 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5986 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5987 *(.data)
5988 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5989 @}
5990 @dots{} @}
5991 @end group
5992 @end smallexample
5993 @noindent
5994 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5995 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5996 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5997 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5998
5999 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6000
6001 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6002 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6003 @cindex section alignment
6004 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6005 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6006 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6007 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6008 value in that section.
6009 @smallexample
6010 @group
6011 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6012 .output @{
6013 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6014 @dots{}
6015 @}
6016 @dots{} @}
6017 @end group
6018 @end smallexample
6019
6020 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6021 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6022 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6023 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6024 section.
6025
6026 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6027 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6028 This is equivalent to either
6029 @smallexample
6030 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6031 @end smallexample
6032 or
6033 @smallexample
6034 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6035 @end smallexample
6036 @noindent
6037 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6038 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6039 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6040 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6041 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6042 bytes in the on-disk file.
6043
6044 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6045 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6046 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6047 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6048 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6049
6050 @noindent
6051 Example:
6052 @smallexample
6053 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6054 @end smallexample
6055
6056 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6057 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6058 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6059 evaluation purposes.
6060
6061 @smallexample
6062 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6063 @end smallexample
6064
6065 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6066 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6067 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6068 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6069 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6070 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6071 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6072 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6073 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6074 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6075 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6076 section alignment.
6077
6078 @smallexample
6079 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6080 @end smallexample
6081
6082 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6083 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6084 @cindex symbol defaults
6085 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6086 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6087 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6088 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6089 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6090 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6091 existed, its value is preserved:
6092
6093 @smallexample
6094 @group
6095 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6096 .text : @{
6097 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6098 @dots{}
6099 @}
6100 @dots{}
6101 @}
6102 @end group
6103 @end smallexample
6104
6105 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6106 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6107 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6108
6109 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6110 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6111 @cindex section load address in expression
6112 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6113 Section LMA}).
6114
6115 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6116 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6117 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6118 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6119
6120 @kindex MAX
6121 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6122 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6123
6124 @kindex MIN
6125 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6126 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6127
6128 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6129 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6130 @cindex unallocated address, next
6131 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6132 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6133 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6134 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6135
6136 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6137 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6138 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6139
6140 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6141 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6142 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6143 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6144 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6145 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6146 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6147 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6148 name.
6149
6150 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6151 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6152 @cindex section size
6153 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6154 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6155 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6156 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6157 @smallexample
6158 @group
6159 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6160 .output @{
6161 .start = . ;
6162 @dots{}
6163 .end = . ;
6164 @}
6165 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6166 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6167 @dots{} @}
6168 @end group
6169 @end smallexample
6170
6171 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6172 @itemx sizeof_headers
6173 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6174 @cindex header size
6175 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6176 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6177 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6178 choose, to facilitate paging.
6179
6180 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6181 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6182 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6183 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6184 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6185 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6186 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6187 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6188 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6189 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6190 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6191 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6192 @end table
6193
6194 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6195 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6196 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6197 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6198 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6199 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6200 linker will report an error.
6201
6202 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6203
6204 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6205 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6206 commands.
6207
6208 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6209 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6210 read. This can affect archive searching.
6211
6212 @ifset GENERIC
6213 @node Machine Dependent
6214 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6215
6216 @cindex machine dependencies
6217 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6218 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6219 functionality are not listed.
6220
6221 @menu
6222 @ifset H8300
6223 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6224 @end ifset
6225 @ifset I960
6226 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6227 @end ifset
6228 @ifset M68HC11
6229 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6230 @end ifset
6231 @ifset ARM
6232 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6233 @end ifset
6234 @ifset HPPA
6235 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6236 @end ifset
6237 @ifset M68K
6238 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6239 @end ifset
6240 @ifset MIPS
6241 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6242 @end ifset
6243 @ifset MMIX
6244 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6245 @end ifset
6246 @ifset MSP430
6247 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6248 @end ifset
6249 @ifset NDS32
6250 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6251 @end ifset
6252 @ifset NIOSII
6253 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6254 @end ifset
6255 @ifset POWERPC
6256 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6257 @end ifset
6258 @ifset POWERPC64
6259 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6260 @end ifset
6261 @ifset SPU
6262 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6263 @end ifset
6264 @ifset TICOFF
6265 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6266 @end ifset
6267 @ifset WIN32
6268 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6269 @end ifset
6270 @ifset XTENSA
6271 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6272 @end ifset
6273 @end menu
6274 @end ifset
6275
6276 @ifset H8300
6277 @ifclear GENERIC
6278 @raisesections
6279 @end ifclear
6280
6281 @node H8/300
6282 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6283
6284 @cindex H8/300 support
6285 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6286 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6287
6288 @table @emph
6289 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6290 @item relaxing address modes
6291 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6292 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6293 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6294 respectively.
6295
6296 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6297 @item synthesizing instructions
6298 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6299 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6300 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6301 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6302 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6303 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6304 top page of memory).
6305
6306 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6307 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6308 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6309 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6310 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6311 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6312 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6313
6314 @item bit manipulation instructions
6315 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6316 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6317 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6318 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6319 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6320 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6321 the top page of memory).
6322
6323 @item system control instructions
6324 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6325 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6326 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6327 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6328 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6329 the top page of memory).
6330 @end table
6331
6332 @ifclear GENERIC
6333 @lowersections
6334 @end ifclear
6335 @end ifset
6336
6337 @ifclear GENERIC
6338 @ifset Renesas
6339 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6340 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6341 @node Renesas
6342 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6343
6344 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6345 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6346 options are required for these chips.
6347 @end ifset
6348 @end ifclear
6349
6350 @ifset I960
6351 @ifclear GENERIC
6352 @raisesections
6353 @end ifclear
6354
6355 @node i960
6356 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6357
6358 @cindex i960 support
6359
6360 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6361 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6362 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6363 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6364 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6365 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6366 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6367
6368 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6369 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6370 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6371 the names
6372
6373 @smallexample
6374 @group
6375 try
6376 libtry.a
6377 tryca
6378 libtryca.a
6379 @end group
6380 @end smallexample
6381
6382 @noindent
6383 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6384 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6385
6386 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6387 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6388 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6389 specifies a library.
6390
6391 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6392 @cindex relaxing on i960
6393 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6394 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6395 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6396 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6397 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6398 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6399 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6400 not itself call any subroutines).
6401
6402 @ifclear GENERIC
6403 @lowersections
6404 @end ifclear
6405 @end ifset
6406
6407 @ifset ARM
6408 @ifclear GENERIC
6409 @raisesections
6410 @end ifclear
6411
6412 @ifset M68HC11
6413 @ifclear GENERIC
6414 @raisesections
6415 @end ifclear
6416
6417 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6418 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6419
6420 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6421
6422 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6423
6424 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6425 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6426
6427 @table @emph
6428 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6429 @item relaxing address modes
6430 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6431 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6432 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6433 respectively.
6434
6435 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6436 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6437 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6438
6439 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6440 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6441 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6442 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6443 @code{bset} instructions.
6444
6445 @end table
6446
6447 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6448
6449 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6450 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6451 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6452 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6453 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6454 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6455 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6456 point to the function trampoline.
6457
6458 @ifclear GENERIC
6459 @lowersections
6460 @end ifclear
6461 @end ifset
6462
6463 @node ARM
6464 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6465
6466 @cindex ARM interworking support
6467 @kindex --support-old-code
6468 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6469 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6470 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6471 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6472 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6473 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6474 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6475 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6476 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6477 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6478
6479 @cindex thumb entry point
6480 @cindex entry point, thumb
6481 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6482 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6483 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6484 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6485 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6486 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6487
6488 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6489 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6490 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6491 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6492 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6493 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6494
6495 @cindex BE8
6496 @kindex --be8
6497 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6498 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6499 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6500 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6501 little-endian code.
6502
6503 @cindex TARGET1
6504 @kindex --target1-rel
6505 @kindex --target1-abs
6506 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6507 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6508 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6509 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6510
6511 @cindex TARGET2
6512 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6513 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6514 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6515 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6516 @table @samp
6517 @item rel
6518 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6519 @item abs
6520 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6521 @item got-rel
6522 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6523 @end table
6524
6525 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6526 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6527 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6528 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6529 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6530 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6531
6532 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6533 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6534 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6535
6536 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6537 relocations are ignored.
6538
6539 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6540 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6541 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6542 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6543
6544 @smallexample
6545 TST rM, #1
6546 MOVEQ PC, rM
6547 BX Rn
6548 @end smallexample
6549
6550 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6551 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6552 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6553
6554 @cindex USE_BLX
6555 @kindex --use-blx
6556 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6557 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6558 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6559 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6560 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6561
6562 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6563 specify it if you are using that target.
6564
6565 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6566 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6567 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6568 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6569 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6570 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6571 the support code can read the intended values.
6572
6573 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6574 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6575 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6576 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6577 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6578 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6579
6580 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6581 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6582 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6583 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6584 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6585 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6586
6587 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6588 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6589 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6590 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6591 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6592 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6593 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6594
6595 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6596 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6597 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6598 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6599 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6600 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6601 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6602
6603 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6604 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6605 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6606
6607 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6608 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6609 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6610 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6611 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6612 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6613 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6614 not be diagnosed.
6615
6616 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6617 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6618 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6619 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6620 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6621 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6622 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6623
6624 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6625 @kindex --pic-veneer
6626 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6627 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6628 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6629 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6630
6631 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6632 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6633 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6634 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6635 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6636 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6637 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6638 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6639 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6640 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6641 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6642 where they should be placed.
6643
6644 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6645 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6646 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6647 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6648 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6649 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6650 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6651 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6652 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6653 from the input sections.
6654
6655 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6656 @samp{N = +1}.
6657
6658 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6659 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6660 otherwise.
6661
6662 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6663 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6664 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6665 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6666
6667 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6668
6669 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6670 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6671 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6672 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6673
6674 Please contact ARM for further details.
6675
6676 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6677 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6678 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6679 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6680
6681 @kindex --long-plt
6682 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6683 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6684 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6685 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6686
6687 @ifclear GENERIC
6688 @lowersections
6689 @end ifclear
6690 @end ifset
6691
6692 @ifset HPPA
6693 @ifclear GENERIC
6694 @raisesections
6695 @end ifclear
6696
6697 @node HPPA ELF32
6698 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6699 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6700 @kindex --multi-subspace
6701 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6702 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6703 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6704 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6705 multiple sub-spaces.
6706
6707 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6708 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6709 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6710 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6711 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6712 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6713 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6714 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6715 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6716 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6717 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6718 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6719 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6720 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6721 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6722 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6723
6724 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6725 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6726 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6727 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6728
6729 @ifclear GENERIC
6730 @lowersections
6731 @end ifclear
6732 @end ifset
6733
6734 @ifset M68K
6735 @ifclear GENERIC
6736 @raisesections
6737 @end ifclear
6738
6739 @node M68K
6740 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6741
6742 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6743 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6744 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6745 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6746 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6747 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6748 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6749 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6750 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6751 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6752 support such GOTs.
6753 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6754 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6755 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6756 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6757
6758 @ifclear GENERIC
6759 @lowersections
6760 @end ifclear
6761 @end ifset
6762
6763 @ifset MIPS
6764 @ifclear GENERIC
6765 @raisesections
6766 @end ifclear
6767
6768 @node MIPS
6769 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6770
6771 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6772 @kindex --insn32
6773 @kindex --no-insn32
6774 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6775 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6776 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6777 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6778 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6779 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6780
6781 @ifclear GENERIC
6782 @lowersections
6783 @end ifclear
6784 @end ifset
6785
6786 @ifset MMIX
6787 @ifclear GENERIC
6788 @raisesections
6789 @end ifclear
6790
6791 @node MMIX
6792 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6793 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6794 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6795 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6796 can translate between the two formats.
6797
6798 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6799 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6800 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6801 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6802 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6803 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6804 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6805 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6806
6807 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6808 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6809 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6810 of a section.
6811
6812 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6813 are left out from an mmo file.
6814
6815 @ifclear GENERIC
6816 @lowersections
6817 @end ifclear
6818 @end ifset
6819
6820 @ifset MSP430
6821 @ifclear GENERIC
6822 @raisesections
6823 @end ifclear
6824
6825 @node MSP430
6826 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6827 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6828 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6829 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6830
6831 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6832 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6833
6834 @table @code
6835 @item @samp{.vectors}
6836 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6837
6838 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6839 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6840 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6841
6842 @item @samp{.infomem}
6843 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6844 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6845
6846 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6847 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6848 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6849
6850 @item @samp{.noinit}
6851 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6852
6853 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6854 @end table
6855
6856 @ifclear GENERIC
6857 @lowersections
6858 @end ifclear
6859 @end ifset
6860
6861 @ifset NDS32
6862 @ifclear GENERIC
6863 @raisesections
6864 @end ifclear
6865
6866 @node NDS32
6867 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6868 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6869 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6870 relaxes objects according to these options.
6871
6872 @table @code
6873 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6874 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6875
6876 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6877 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6878
6879 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6880 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6881
6882 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6883 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6884
6885 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6886 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6887
6888 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6889 Update the existing EX9 table.
6890
6891 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6892 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6893
6894 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6895 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6896
6897 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6898 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6899
6900 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6901 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6902 @end table
6903
6904 @ifclear GENERIC
6905 @lowersections
6906 @end ifclear
6907 @end ifset
6908
6909 @ifset NIOSII
6910 @ifclear GENERIC
6911 @raisesections
6912 @end ifclear
6913
6914 @node Nios II
6915 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6916 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6917 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6918
6919 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6920 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6921 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6922 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6923 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6924 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6925 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6926 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6927 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6928 larger than 256MB.
6929
6930 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6931 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6932 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6933 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6934 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6935 register as a temporary.
6936
6937 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6938 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6939 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6940
6941 @ifclear GENERIC
6942 @lowersections
6943 @end ifclear
6944 @end ifset
6945
6946 @ifset POWERPC
6947 @ifclear GENERIC
6948 @raisesections
6949 @end ifclear
6950
6951 @node PowerPC ELF32
6952 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6953 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6954 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6955 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6956 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6957 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6958 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6959 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6960 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6961 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6962 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6963 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6964 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6965
6966 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6967 @table @option
6968 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6969 @kindex --bss-plt
6970 @item --bss-plt
6971 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6972 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6973 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6974 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6975 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6976 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6977 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6978 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6979
6980 @kindex --secure-plt
6981 @item --secure-plt
6982 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6983 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6984 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6985 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6986 style BSS PLT.
6987
6988 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6989 @kindex --sdata-got
6990 @item --sdata-got
6991 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6992 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6993 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6994 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6995 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6996 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6997 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6998 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6999 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7000 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7001 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7002 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7003
7004 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7005 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7006 @item --emit-stub-syms
7007 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7008 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7009
7010 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7011 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7012 @item --no-tls-optimize
7013 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7014 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7015 disable the optimization.
7016 @end table
7017
7018 @ifclear GENERIC
7019 @lowersections
7020 @end ifclear
7021 @end ifset
7022
7023 @ifset POWERPC64
7024 @ifclear GENERIC
7025 @raisesections
7026 @end ifclear
7027
7028 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7029 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7030
7031 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7032 @table @option
7033 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7034 @kindex --stub-group-size
7035 @item --stub-group-size
7036 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7037 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7038 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7039 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7040 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7041 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7042 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7043 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7044 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7045 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7046 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7047 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7048 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7049 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7050
7051 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7052 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7053 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7054 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7055
7056 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7057 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7058 @item --emit-stub-syms
7059 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7060 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7061
7062 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7063 @kindex --dotsyms
7064 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7065 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7066 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7067 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7068 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7069 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7070 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7071 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7072 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7073 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7074 feature.
7075
7076 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7077 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7078 @item --no-tls-optimize
7079 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7080 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7081 disable the optimization.
7082
7083 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7084 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7085 @item --no-opd-optimize
7086 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7087 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7088 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7089 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7090
7091 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7092 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7093 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7094 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7095 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7096 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7097 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7098
7099 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7100 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7101 @item --no-toc-optimize
7102 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7103 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7104 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7105 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7106 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7107 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7108 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7109 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7110 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7111 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7112 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7113 optimization.
7114
7115 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7116 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7117 @item --no-multi-toc
7118 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7119 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7120 where TOC
7121 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7122 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7123 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7124 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7125 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7126 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7127 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7128 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7129
7130 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7131 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7132 @item --no-toc-sort
7133 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7134 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7135 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7136 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7137 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7138 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7139 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7140 off this feature.
7141
7142 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7143 @kindex --plt-align
7144 @kindex --no-plt-align
7145 @item --plt-align
7146 @itemx --no-plt-align
7147 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7148 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7149 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7150 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7151 stubs are packed tightly.
7152
7153 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7154 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7155 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7156 @item --plt-static-chain
7157 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7158 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7159 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7160 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7161
7162 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7163 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7164 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7165 @item --plt-thread-safe
7166 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7167 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7168 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7169 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7170 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7171 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7172 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7173 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7174 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7175 default behaviour.
7176 @end table
7177
7178 @ifclear GENERIC
7179 @lowersections
7180 @end ifclear
7181 @end ifset
7182
7183 @ifset SPU
7184 @ifclear GENERIC
7185 @raisesections
7186 @end ifclear
7187
7188 @node SPU ELF
7189 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7190
7191 @cindex SPU ELF options
7192 @table @option
7193
7194 @cindex SPU plugins
7195 @kindex --plugin
7196 @item --plugin
7197 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7198
7199 @cindex SPU overlays
7200 @kindex --no-overlays
7201 @item --no-overlays
7202 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7203 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7204 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7205 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7206
7207 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7208 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7209 @item --emit-stub-syms
7210 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7211 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7212
7213 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7214 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7215 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7216 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7217 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7218 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7219
7220 @cindex SPU local store size
7221 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7222 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7223 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7224 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7225 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7226
7227 @cindex SPU
7228 @kindex --stack-analysis
7229 @item --stack-analysis
7230 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7231 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7232 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7233 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7234 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7235 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7236 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7237 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7238 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7239 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7240 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7241 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7242 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7243 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7244 and calls will be given.
7245
7246 @cindex SPU
7247 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7248 @item --emit-stack-syms
7249 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7250 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7251 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7252 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7253 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7254 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7255 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7256 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7257 @end table
7258
7259 @ifclear GENERIC
7260 @lowersections
7261 @end ifclear
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @ifset TICOFF
7265 @ifclear GENERIC
7266 @raisesections
7267 @end ifclear
7268
7269 @node TI COFF
7270 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7271 @cindex TI COFF versions
7272 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7273 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7274 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7275 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7276 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7277 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7278
7279 @ifclear GENERIC
7280 @lowersections
7281 @end ifclear
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @ifset WIN32
7285 @ifclear GENERIC
7286 @raisesections
7287 @end ifclear
7288
7289 @node WIN32
7290 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7291
7292 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7293 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7294 command line options mentioned here.
7295
7296 @table @emph
7297 @cindex import libraries
7298 @item import libraries
7299 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7300 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7301 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7302 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7303 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7304 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7305
7306 @item exporting DLL symbols
7307 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7308 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7309
7310 @table @emph
7311 @item using auto-export functionality
7312 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7313 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7314 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7315
7316 @itemize
7317 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7318 @item --exclude-symbols
7319 @item --exclude-libs
7320 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7321 @item --version-script
7322 @end itemize
7323
7324 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7325 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7326 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7327 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7328 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7329 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7330 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7331 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7332
7333 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7334 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7335 if either of the following are true:
7336
7337 @itemize
7338 @item A DEF file is used.
7339 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7340 @end itemize
7341
7342 @item using a DEF file
7343 @cindex using a DEF file
7344 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7345 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7346 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7347 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7348 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7349
7350 @example
7351 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7352 @end example
7353
7354 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7355 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7356
7357 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7358
7359 @example
7360 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7361
7362 EXPORTS
7363 foo
7364 bar
7365 _bar = bar
7366 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7367 var1 DATA
7368 doo = foo == foo2
7369 eoo DATA == var1
7370 @end example
7371
7372 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7373 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7374 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7375 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7376 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7377 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7378 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7379 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7380 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7381
7382 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7383 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7384 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7385
7386 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7387 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7388 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7389 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7390
7391 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7392 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7393 non-default base address for the image.
7394
7395 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7396 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7397 filename specified on the command line.
7398
7399 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7400
7401 @example
7402 EXPORTS
7403 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7404 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7405 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7406 @end example
7407
7408 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7409 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7410 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7411 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7412 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7413 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7414 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7415
7416 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7417
7418 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7419 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7420 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7421 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7422 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7423
7424 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7425 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7426 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7427 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7428
7429 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7430 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7431 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7432 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7433 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7434 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7435 application will behave unexpectedly.
7436
7437 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7438 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7439 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7440 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7441 the DLL without an import library.
7442
7443 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7444 other DEF file statements
7445
7446 @cindex creating a DEF file
7447 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7448 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7449
7450 @item Using decorations
7451 @cindex Using decorations
7452 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7453 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7454 declared as:
7455
7456 @example
7457 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7458 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7459 @end example
7460
7461 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7462 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7463 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7464 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7465
7466 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7467 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7468 instead:
7469
7470 @example
7471 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7472 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7473 @end example
7474
7475 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7476 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7477 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7478 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7479 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7480 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7481 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7482 information.
7483 @end table
7484
7485 @cindex automatic data imports
7486 @item automatic data imports
7487 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7488 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7489 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7490 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7491 code to these platforms, especially for large
7492 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7493 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7494 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7495 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7496 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7497 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7498 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7499 trigger the feature's use.
7500
7501 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7502 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7503
7504 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7505 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7506
7507 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7508 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7509 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7510 below.
7511
7512 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7513 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7514 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7515 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7516 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7517 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7518 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7519 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7520 references.
7521
7522 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7523 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7524 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7525 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7526 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7527 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7528 run without error on an older system.
7529
7530 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7531 enabled as needed.
7532
7533 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7534 @item direct linking to a dll
7535 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7536 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7537 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7538 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7539 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7540 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7541 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7542 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7543 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7544 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7545
7546 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7547 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7548 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7549 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7550 select the dll instead of an import library.
7551
7552
7553 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7554 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7555
7556 @example
7557 libxxx.dll.a
7558 xxx.dll.a
7559 libxxx.a
7560 xxx.lib
7561 cygxxx.dll (*)
7562 libxxx.dll
7563 xxx.dll
7564 @end example
7565
7566 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7567
7568 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7569 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7570 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7571 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7572 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7573
7574 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7575 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7576 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7577 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7578 could coexist on the same machine.
7579
7580 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7581 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7582 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7583
7584 @example
7585 bin/
7586 cygxxx.dll
7587 lib/
7588 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7589 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7590 @end example
7591
7592 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7593 done two ways:
7594
7595 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7596 @example
7597 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7598 @end example
7599
7600 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7601 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7602 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7603 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7604
7605 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7606 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7607 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7608 making the app/dll.
7609
7610 @example
7611 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7612 @end example
7613
7614 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7615
7616 @example
7617 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7618 @end example
7619
7620 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7621 perfectly legal
7622
7623 @example
7624 bin/
7625 cygxxx-5.dll
7626 lib/
7627 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7628 @end example
7629
7630 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7631 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7632 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7633
7634 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7635 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7636
7637 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7638 work with auto-imported data.
7639
7640 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7641 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7642 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7643 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7644 possible to do this without an import lib.
7645
7646 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7647 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7648 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7649 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7650
7651 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7652 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7653 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7654 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7655 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7656 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7657 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7658
7659 @item symbol aliasing
7660 @table @emph
7661 @item adding additional names
7662 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7663 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7664 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7665 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7666 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7667
7668 @example
7669 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7670
7671 EXPORTS
7672 foo
7673 _foo = foo
7674 @end example
7675
7676 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7677
7678 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7679 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7680
7681 @example
7682 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7683 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7684 @end example
7685
7686 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7687 symbols.
7688
7689 @item renaming symbols
7690 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7691 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7692 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7693 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7694 created). In the following example:
7695
7696 @example
7697 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7698
7699 EXPORTS
7700 _foo = foo
7701 @end example
7702
7703 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7704 @samp{_foo}.
7705 @end table
7706
7707 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7708 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7709 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7710 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7711 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7712 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7713 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7714 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7715 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7716 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7717 which is probably not what you wanted.
7718
7719 @cindex weak externals
7720 @item weak externals
7721 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7722 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7723 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7724 are three variants of weak externals:
7725 @itemize
7726 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7727 called lazy externals.
7728 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7729 This form is not presently implemented.
7730 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7731 implemented.
7732 @end itemize
7733 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7734 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7735 uses a default value.
7736
7737 @cindex aligned common symbols
7738 @item aligned common symbols
7739 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7740 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7741 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7742 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7743 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7744 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7745 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7746 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7747
7748 @end table
7749
7750 @ifclear GENERIC
7751 @lowersections
7752 @end ifclear
7753 @end ifset
7754
7755 @ifset XTENSA
7756 @ifclear GENERIC
7757 @raisesections
7758 @end ifclear
7759
7760 @node Xtensa
7761 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7762
7763 @cindex Xtensa processors
7764 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7765 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7766 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7767 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7768 example, with the command:
7769
7770 @smallexample
7771 SECTIONS
7772 @{
7773 .text : @{
7774 *(.literal .text)
7775 @}
7776 @}
7777 @end smallexample
7778
7779 @noindent
7780 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7781 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7782 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7783 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7784 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7785 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7786 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7787
7788 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7789 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7790 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7791 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7792 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7793 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7794 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7795 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7796 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7797 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7798 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7799 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7800
7801 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7802 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7803 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7804 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7805 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7806 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7807 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7808 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7809 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7810 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7811 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7812 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7813 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7814 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7815
7816 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7817 control the linker:
7818
7819 @cindex Xtensa options
7820 @table @option
7821 @item --size-opt
7822 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7823 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7824 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7825 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7826 preserve the correctness of the code.
7827 @end table
7828
7829 @ifclear GENERIC
7830 @lowersections
7831 @end ifclear
7832 @end ifset
7833
7834 @ifclear SingleFormat
7835 @node BFD
7836 @chapter BFD
7837
7838 @cindex back end
7839 @cindex object file management
7840 @cindex object formats available
7841 @kindex objdump -i
7842 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7843 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7844 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7845 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7846 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7847 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7848 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7849 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7850 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7851
7852 @cindex BFD requirements
7853 @cindex requirements for BFD
7854 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7855 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7856 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7857 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7858 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7859 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7860 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7861
7862 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7863 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7864 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7865 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7866
7867 @menu
7868 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7869 @end menu
7870
7871 @node BFD outline
7872 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7873 @cindex opening object files
7874 @include bfdsumm.texi
7875 @end ifclear
7876
7877 @node Reporting Bugs
7878 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7879 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7880 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7881
7882 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7883
7884 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7885 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7886 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7887 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7888 @command{ld}.
7889
7890 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7891 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7892
7893 @menu
7894 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7895 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7896 @end menu
7897
7898 @node Bug Criteria
7899 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7900 @cindex bug criteria
7901
7902 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7903
7904 @itemize @bullet
7905 @cindex fatal signal
7906 @cindex linker crash
7907 @cindex crash of linker
7908 @item
7909 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7910 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7911
7912 @cindex error on valid input
7913 @item
7914 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7915
7916 @cindex invalid input
7917 @item
7918 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7919 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7920 object files are correct.
7921
7922 @item
7923 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7924 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7925 @end itemize
7926
7927 @node Bug Reporting
7928 @section How to Report Bugs
7929 @cindex bug reports
7930 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7931
7932 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7933 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7934 recommend you contact that organization first.
7935
7936 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7937 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7938 distribution.
7939
7940 @ifset BUGURL
7941 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7942 @value{BUGURL}.
7943 @end ifset
7944
7945 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7946 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7947 fact or leave it out, state it!
7948
7949 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7950 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7951 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7952 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7953 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7954 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7955 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7956 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7957 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7958 and the most helpful.
7959
7960 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7961 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7962 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7963
7964 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7965 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7966 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7967 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7968
7969 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7970
7971 @itemize @bullet
7972 @item
7973 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7974 the @samp{--version} argument.
7975
7976 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7977 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7978
7979 @item
7980 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7981 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7982
7983 @item
7984 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7985 version number.
7986
7987 @item
7988 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7989 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7990
7991 @item
7992 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7993 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7994 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7995 sufficient.
7996
7997 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7998 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7999
8000 @item
8001 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8002 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8003 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8004 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8005 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8006 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8007 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8008 attachments are best.
8009
8010 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8011 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8012 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8013 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8014 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8015
8016 @item
8017 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8018 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8019
8020 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8021 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8022 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8023 a chance to make a mistake.
8024
8025 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8026 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8027 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8028 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8029 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8030 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8031 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8032 any conclusion from our observations.
8033
8034 @item
8035 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8036 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8037 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8038 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8039 context, not by line number.
8040
8041 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8042 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8043 @end itemize
8044
8045 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8046
8047 @itemize @bullet
8048 @item
8049 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8050
8051 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8052 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8053 changes will not affect it.
8054
8055 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8056 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8057 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8058 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8059
8060 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8061 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8062 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8063 less time, and so on.
8064
8065 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8066 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8067
8068 @item
8069 A patch for the bug.
8070
8071 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8072 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8073 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8074 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8075
8076 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8077 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8078 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8079 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8080 fixed.
8081
8082 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8083 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8084 help us to understand.
8085
8086 @item
8087 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8088
8089 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8090 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8091 @end itemize
8092
8093 @node MRI
8094 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8095 @cindex MRI compatibility
8096 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8097 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8098 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8099 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8100 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8101 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8102 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8103
8104 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8105 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8106 features to make use of them.
8107
8108 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8109 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8110
8111 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8112 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8113 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8114 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8115 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8116
8117 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8118
8119 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8120 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8121 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8122
8123 @table @code
8124 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8125 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8126 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8127 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8128 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8129 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8130 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8131 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8132 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8133 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8134 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8135
8136 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8137 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8138 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8139 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8140
8141 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8142
8143 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8144 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8145 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8146 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8147
8148 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8149 @item BASE @var{expression}
8150 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8151 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8152
8153 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8154 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8155 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8156 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8157
8158 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8159 @item END
8160 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8161
8162 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8163 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8164 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8165 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8166
8167 @enumerate
8168 @item
8169 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8170
8171 @item
8172 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8173
8174 @item
8175 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8176 @samp{COFF}
8177 @end enumerate
8178
8179 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8180 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8181 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8182 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8183
8184 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8185 same line, with no change in its effect.
8186
8187 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8188 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8189 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8190 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8191 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8192 command line.
8193
8194 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8195 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8196 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8197 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8198 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8199
8200 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8201 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8202 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8203 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8204 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8205 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8206 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8207 file, in the order specified.
8208
8209 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8210 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8211 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8212 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8213 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8214 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8215
8216 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8217 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8218 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8219 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8220 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8221 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8222 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8223 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8224 @end table
8225
8226 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8227 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8228 @include fdl.texi
8229
8230 @node LD Index
8231 @unnumbered LD Index
8232
8233 @printindex cp
8234
8235 @tex
8236 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8237 % meantime:
8238 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8239 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8240 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8241 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8242 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8243 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8244 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8245 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8246 \page\colophon
8247 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8248 @end tex
8249
8250 @bye